Home

2008 JK Jeep Wrangler Owner Manual

Contents

1. ABS Anti Lock Brake System 100 Removing The Soft Top 114 TCS Traction Control System 101 Installing The Soft Top 116 BAS Brake Assist System 102 W Freedom Top 3 Piece Modular Hard Top 119 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 103 Front Panel s Removal ESP Electronic Stability Program 104 Front Panel s Installation 122 ESP BAS Warning Lamp 109 Front Panel s Installation Only With Rear Bi Electrical Power Outlet 00005 110 Eland Top RORROVESI tess asd ects tai a Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off i RET OP REDOVAN pratisara E ll Cap Holds i cancisviiasivaeeiavares nm Rear Hard Top Installation 125 Dee eoe eo Du ema dra NIA TRI AOI eee T MA ME Es Console Storage Compartment 112 DAON Prana Removal 7 DOOM sta ne Rear Storage Compartment 0 0000 113 Door Frame Installation 2 Door Models 128 Door Frame Removal 4 Door Models 129 E Dual Top If Equipped 114 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Door Frame Installation 4 Door Models 132 W Folding Windshield 185 H Soft Top 2 Door Models 134 Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Fold
2. 0 000 246 Selecting Satellite Mode 246 Satellite Antenna 0004 246 Reception Quality 000 247 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 247 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone iL Equipped 6c 3s ect She cea ee 249 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped 249 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 249 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 250 E Climate Controls 00 00 0004 250 Manual Heater Only 0 250 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System If Equipped 252 Operating Tips 6 6 ee eee eee eee 256 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 81c25955 1 Air Outlet 6 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Power Outlet 3 Horn 8 Lower Switch Bank 4 Radio 9 Auxiliary Power Outlet 5 Glove Box UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81918b50 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION Your vehicle is equipped with the instrument cluster described on the following pages 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank When the fuel gauge pointer initially moves to E for your safety approx
3. 251 252 254 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 95 Diagnostic System Onboard 363 Dimmer Switch Headlight 93 en INDEX 433 Dipsticks OU Engine cave Paes ere hoe Ca a bare eis 367 Disabled Vehicle Towing sess 358 Disarming Theft System llli 18 Disposal Engine Oil iiu eek em sexe A a 369 Used Coolant Antifreeze lesen 381 Door Locks 42222 eR RR eR 29 DOOIS amp 2vazdk SA oe aa ea 6a UR RDO 6 Y Pn 26 Drive Belts i2 pex E E 370 Driver s Seat Back Tilt llle 83 DVitig speia dns ea pedet dee eeu eed es 287 Off Pavement lle 287 OB Rodd oder ana anise sas ere aoe a SES 287 Dual Top c3 cs dx eee ereda aed ae iE ken 114 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 110 Electrical Power Outlets 0005 110 Electronic Brake Control System 100 Anti Lock Brake System llus 100 Brake Assist System llle 102 Electronic Roll Mitigation 103 Electronic Stability Program 104 Traction Control System 00 101 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 103 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 97 Electronic Stability Program ESP 104 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 209 Emergency Brake llle 292 Emergency In Case of Brake Warning Light 000 202 Coolant Tempe
4. 0 0000 cee 210 i Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With Trip Conditions s s xe anak eae a hes 211 FEDERE MEAUX Jad o aok eae iea al Compass Temperature Display 212 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 216 Bl Radio General Information 215 a penis 5 i ae me 0 Radio Broadcast Signals 215 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 224 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack ob uer duck etus qaos 3 E eerte Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play CPC Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 2 i oterd Hea eee e motto es ll Sales Code RER AM FM CD DVD Radio With Navigation System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio 244 Clock Setting Procedure 244 H Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped REQ And RES Radios Only 0 00 ee eee 245 system Activation aux x eg b ae RR s 245 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID
5. 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M11 10Amp Ignition Off Draw M15 20Amp COL MOD IR SNS Red IOD HVAC ATC Yellow Heater Ventilation Air MW SENSR Under Conditioning hood Lamp UH Automatic Tempera LMP ture Control HVAC M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP ATC Rear View Green Mirror RR VW MIR T Cabin Compartment M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Node CCN Transfer Yellow Cabin Compartment Case Switch T CASE Node IOD CCN SW RUN ST Multi Wireless Control Mod F ncton Control ule WCM SIREN Switch MULTIFTCN Multi Function Con SW Tire Pressure trol Switch MULTI FCTN SW Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export PLG MOD Export Yellow Only Diesel Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M22 10 Amp Right Horn RT Red Controller ORC Red HORN HI LOW M17 15 Amp Left Tail License M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Blue Park Lamp LT TAIL Red HI LOW LIC PRK LMP M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run Natural WIPER Blue Lamp RT TAIL M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL PRK RUN LMP Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift
6. 9 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 10 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 11 To install the side windows affix the window tem side channel leaving the last three 3 inches towards the porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the Start the zipper but close only about 1 inch 2 5 cm rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with se the retainers ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 12 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 13 Continue closing the zipper only along the top edge of the window 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed o
7. 21 Close the front header latches 22 Remove door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 11 Plastic Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door 6 Ensure that the top locks into Sunrider locking mecha frame tracks and slide the top forward nisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 81926dc3 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
8. SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES mm Guide CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the
9. 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weig
10. Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels nn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid rearward over Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Before attaching the header latches be sure that the top retainers above the door are not trapped between the top and the door frame 6 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails Sunrider Models Only 7 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 819259f4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 8 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge
11. E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the WARNING vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a ecod contact on heene ne e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing i or towing 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged WARNING battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The Any procedure other than above could result in battery temperature must be brought up above 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out freezing point before attempting jump start the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle 358 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES Emm EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are mounted in the front and
12. Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel JACKING LOCATION ee Jacking Locations ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355 7 Position spare wheel tire on vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tighten nuts clockwise To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove jack assembly and wheel blocks WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions JUMP STARTING If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
13. e Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer e Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Install chains snugly and tighten after 6 mile 1 km of driving e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h e Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram EJ FRONT a 80316864 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring Syst
14. eee eee eee 405 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 200 High Beam ius ebbe eR ES tes 201 Loading Vehicle s secs so oe Pers 327 High Beam Indicator 200 201 TiteS Quse e Re UR ROS Re ARR RU S 302 Instrument Cluster iiec rre Re RE 93 Locking Axl 2a esee euh Ee eta 283 284 lieitasro Dr 91 Locks Lights On Reminder 000005 93 DOOF 3 15 ed Darse Roe doni RE V ets 29 Low Fuel 4212 uc duse reU ahs RU RU a ee 200 Powet DOOR caede a i heec dU CROIRE ROS d RC 30 Low Tite iuuenes rere kr e pd ears 204 steering Wheel s s aid grat ag ema 13 en INDEX 439 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 222 4 40 64 44ie qe EUER A RELAY 64 65 Lubrication Body sue krass 376 Maintenance Free Battery 04 373 Maintenance Procedures 0000000 367 Maintenance Schedule ls 412 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 207 364 Manual Service llle 424 Manual Transmission 267 387 Fluid Level Check 0 0 00 00 000 388 Lubricant Selection 0 0 00 0000 eae 387 Shift Speeds ir e br deb ee Pada S ees 269 Master Cylinder Brakes 0 384 Mini Trip Computer 2226 m 209 210 Mirrors sed tees Sura bah red REA IE Ed 79 Outside esed bk qur Deed Pea eS eT hs 80 Reafview sive aces xU dm RO Re SD be RO E Ru 79 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Modular Hard Top 0000 ama
15. Compass Calibration The Automatic Compass Calibration feature eliminates the need for the operator intervention under normal conditions If the CAL indicator is lit the compass needs to be calibrated A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free of large metal objects such as large buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions During a short initial period the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished After initial calibration the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the ve hicle is in motion ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compass calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the P Park position if equipped Compass calibration can also be requested To manually calibrate the compass you must first enter the variance mode Press the and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR Com
16. TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD low range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any position other than P Park and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running ESP BAS If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on momen
17. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Blower Control 81915188 Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem perat
18. a loose door may cause personal injury ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to removing 2 Remove the 2 top hex bolts 13mm and the 1 side hex bolt 13mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Open sport bar Velcro covering 4 Remove 1 hex bolt 13mm visible through the plastic trim on bottom side of side bar 1 hex bolt 13mm on the side of the side bar and 1 hex bolt 13mm on top of the side bar 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Pull side bar out horizontally when removing CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping 5 Remove side bar assembly and reattach sport bar Velcro covering 6 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehi
19. always wear seat belts 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 11 Plastic Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half doors carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cut out in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 4 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops 5
20. but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger restraint airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that WARNING you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you 1 will use it before you buy it e Improper installation can lead to failure of an e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s infant or child restraint It could come loose in a weight and height Check the label on the restraint for collision The child could be badly injured or weight and height limits killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing inf
21. ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off by performing the following steps 1 Press the Unlock button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the Unlock button is pressed after 4 seconds press the Lock button Release both buttons 3 Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the Lock button on the key fob with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your vehicle Additional fobs can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob NOTE When entering program mode using that fob all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will have to reprogram them for your vehicle Use the Following procedure to program additional key fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Ke
22. in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack From Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle 7 SLA The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or mod
23. manner which could jeopardize the user s safety vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability or the safety of others in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided whe
24. or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death en STARTING AND OPERATING 267 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a 1 grounded three wire extension cord The engine block WARNING heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving 6 Speed Manual Transmission Yo
25. replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for yo
26. speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper op eration If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re setting the desired vehicle SET speed Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for th
27. warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature g
28. 4L Low for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to R Reverse Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in R Reverse gear Never back down a hill in N Neutral using only the brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4L Low range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hill
29. 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
30. 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency kHz Bit tate kbp 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 209 441 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 94 2205 16 112 96 80 64 ayer 3 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre F Specification quency kHz Mit Rale khpal 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the
31. Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Spark Plugs 3 8L Engine RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 Oil Filter 3 8L Engine Mopar Oil Filter P N 04105409AC Fuel Selection 87 Octane 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the require ments of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Axle Differential Front Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 198 RBI Model 35 and 226 RBI Model 44 Mopar Gear amp Axle Lubri cant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use Mopar Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Flui
32. Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 420 Quality Grades isse ee rem 426 H if You Need Assistance l l 420 Treadwear lese Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 423 Traction Grades 4 eee eee hee d la Mopar Parts cies eI er nen 423 Temperature Grades 420 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interes
33. It is illegal to remove the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll A Word About Your Keys 0 12 Ignition Key Removal sss 12 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 H Steering Wheel Lock 00 00 13 To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 13 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 lg Sentry Key 6 ccs bet eng ker ERR X 14 Replacement Keys ena paintd llle 15 Customer Key Programming 16 General Information essen 17 ll Security Alarm System If Equipped 17 To Set The Alarm 000 005 18 To Disarm The System 0 18 B Wiuminated Entity 440424 enn 18 lll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 19 To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 19 To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 20 Using The Panic Alarm 0 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 21 iWindows ee
34. LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Buiton DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn
35. Lights 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counter 1 Remove the two 2 inboard screws attaching the tail ear eee Shen remove SENTIR Housing light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace M AGEE aes Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 1 Remove the spare tire 2 Remove the four 4 screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2 Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate 4 Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 8 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 8 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 13 Quarts 12 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant Mopar
36. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on wet or dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Sec tion 5 of this manual 4L Position Four Wheel Drive Low Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maxi mum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 50 mph 80 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L
37. Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildien 3 4 0 3 0454 eR aged 64 65 Lead Free Gasoline llle 320 lights i eei eee CFR exe e ib es s cs 91 Airbag 22e a e serri es 56 202 Anti Lock 24 04 244 2 249 9 eR 202 Anti Lock Warning 0000 202 Back UD soe iced ee qe d Er 407 Brake Assist Warning 109 209 Brake Warning er ruth RR es 202 Bulb Replacement ie se ce raties ataata 405 CIBO x araen doe ated E E E e a 91 Center Mounted Stop 438 INDEX MM Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 207 Oil Pressure uu dos ace Baa ace ack oe Wace ae 201 mo MC LEER 203 PASSING aem a does ai e pute e ge te s 94 Daytime Running ss sr er eaerro mrte neira 94 Rear Servicing iudagus khe Rb nea id 407 Dimmer Switch Headlight 93 Rear Tail a sodrinti 2G erbe ed 407 Electronic Stability Program ESP Seat Belt Reminder 0000 201 IndicatOf io6weaduank Rx oO oe A 109 208 209 Sentry Key i gis ade ie oet es x ed es 203 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 209 DBEVICO scd uenti ele teary ans enon 405 Engine Temperature Warning 203 Side Marker sis 6404s ace deh ER RSS 407 BOGS iets a nti sieben a dese eate Sid Bolg dis 94 406 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 204 Hazard Warning Flasher 350 Traction Control wieso a a 0 0 208 Headlight Switch 0 000 000 ee 93 Turn Signal 1 25 dx 94 201 406 407 Headlights 0 0 0 0
38. Oil Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic NS System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to O
39. Open the swing gate on the windshield frame 6 Before unzipping the rear window release the first three 3 inches of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rear ward out of the swing gate brackets 81b34aa7 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 10 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 11 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being i
40. SYSTEM Ot gy Al awor srake LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM REARFOG LAMP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE a Hi e Her b HAUL VOICE SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING __CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON er d S ON A A i Low LOWER ANCHORS AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL SO Li INTRODUCTION 7 8 INTRODUCTION ee WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on a stamped plate located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of vehicle through windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE
41. Speeds in MPH depressed KM H rod 6th to 5th to 4th to 3rd to 2nd to tion 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Maxi 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 mum Speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 272 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shift Lock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed To
42. The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install right panel first then the left panel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 3 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in 5 Open swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the reverse order rear window glass Lift rear window glass Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two 2 Torx head screws which secure the hard top at the B pillar near top of door using a 40 Torx head driver 4 Door Only 4 Remove the six 6 Torx head screws which secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver 81947a57 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Make sure storage cap is installed to prevent foreign 6 Locate the wiring harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle 7 Disconnect the washer hose and install the tethered cap materials from entering tube and clogging system and also prevent fluid from being sprayed into rear of vehicle 8 Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect NOTE If the red latch on the c
43. Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button t
44. Warning Flasher Hazard 350 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster D scripti n seek sa eae er hie eee ee os 200 Warning Roll Over 0 0 00 e eee eee 5 Warnings and Cautions 0004 8 Warranty Information 423 Washer Adding Fluid sessar tamatamai ws 192 Washers Windshield 377 Waxing and Polishing 04 391 Wheel Alignment and Balance 313 Wheel and Wheel Trim 05 393 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 393 Wheel Mounting 0 0 0 0 e eee 355 Wind Buffeting css lee RReRRERRERECD 35 Window Fogging llle eee 256 Windows lcge ex cee eR cR ee dies 33 DOW 3 du pui Sue sheet atin Hisce dhe iyi 33 Windshield Folding sels 185 Windshield Washers sss 95 377 PIU aire hoe RR Eg REF RURPECA RR 4 377 Windshield Wiper Blades 376 Windshield Wipers 00 0000000 95 Wiper Rear v2 3 99 vero a eed aay eda red E 191 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 393 SERVICE Stick with the Specialists DaimlerChrysler Corporation AR 81 326 0855 First Edition Printed in U S A
45. Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratchin
46. YoU may erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so e Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage When replacing a blown fuse it is important to f use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS IF EQUIPPED Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Light 658 Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 Heater Control Lights 2 eese 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Light Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe Soundbar Dome Light 0 912 Bulbs
47. a spinning wheel no matter what the speed poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be Tire Spinning replaced When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than
48. against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle y Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first va
49. air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e On hardtop models keep the tailgate window closed when driving your vehicle On fabric top models do not drive with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also open This will prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a indicator check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the indicator is not lit during starting have it serviced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper ab
50. airbag system 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 In conjunction with other
51. and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Following off road usage completely inspect the under body of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts Check air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud or debris and clean as required A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance CAUTION Under f
52. and hold it there while cranking the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing engine is flooded serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not erly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper have enough power to continue running when the key is jump starting procedures and follow them carefully engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting
53. booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the w
54. brake system is serviced and every engine oil change You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid wi
55. causes heat buildup and damages the clutch When you slow down or go up a grade downshift as speed requires or the engine may overheat Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting Otherwise transmission or clutch damage may result e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between a forward gear and reverse do not spin wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting Speeds The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift speeds listed in the chart below Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En Speeds 1 to 2 2103 3104 4 to5 5 to6 gine 38L Accel 154 24 34 47 56 39 55 76 90 Cruise 10069 19 27 37 41 G1 43 60 66 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting CAUTION Speeds i To prevent clutch and transmission damage your vehicle should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those listed in the chart below Failure to follow the recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to over speed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is Manual Transmission Downshift
56. data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any th
57. determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustra tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s from Tire Placard weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 305 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and sat
58. engine perfor against you mance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time WARNING the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly windows fully open Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle E STARTING AND OPERATING 325 ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 T
59. es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 81924c19 WARNING Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation 2 Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the bodys ide hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both Door Frame Removal 4 Door Models knobs Repeat on the other side 1 Unscrew and remove the two 2 forward most door frame attachment knobs 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Use both h
60. hood You may have to push down slightly on hood before pushing the handle Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood panel To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Cargo Lamp Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the Un lock button is pressed on the key fob Also the rear cargo lamp may be operated by pressing the lens to turn it on Press the lens again to shut it off 84913477 Cargo Lamp When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to
61. i oso m ea et 333 Holder Cup eese sheds bes coho va gules 111 Hood Release ee ees 90 H ss sicco we Ec pua Bie a Er 383 384 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 0 040 387 Ignition 4114 224 e4 Rea ei de PP d sis 12 Key ibused wd kROL cnd RERO OR RUN ae eS 12 Ignition Key Removal lsssse 12 Illuminated Entry sessseeesesss 18 Immobilizer Sentry Key sess 14 Infant Restraint leen 59 Inflation Pressure Tires lesen 307 en INDEX 437 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 79 Instrument Cluster llle 199 Instrument Panel and Controls 198 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 394 Integrated Power Module Fuses 397 Interior Appearance Care 005 393 Interior Lights 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 000 91 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 95 Introduction 0 0 00 0 ee 4 Jack Location llle 352 Jack Operation se esde sapienti e oaa 352 353 Jacking Instructions 353 JUMp Starting iasused d eae od RO Re ee 355 Key Programming esee 16 Key Replacement 4294 RBS RES 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 14 Key In Reminder kem Res 13 Keyless Entry System llle 19 KEYS aie ets Pa dette eae otra E ebore ES 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 201 Lap Belts roe che ain ouoeeen eSa 38 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 38 LATCH
62. in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with eS out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the automatic transmission in P Park or the manual transmission in N Neutral and turn the ignition OFF Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri on skin flush contaminated area immediately with cal loads large quantities of water ne 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged the vent holes battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e Do not use a 24 volt power source could establish a ground connection and personal 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or injury could result bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact
63. injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat e Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Remote Side Impact Acceleration Sensors If Equipped e Driver and Passenger Seat Track Position Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning ar Light for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the s
64. into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning
65. lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the ov
66. only available from authorized dealer Instrument Cluster Bulb Type Telltale High Beam 0 00000 74 Il minatio t sucer ce E R A 103 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights 2 0 0 epr paia 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light 1 L E D Fog Lights 2000s cus ened RI RR 9145 Front Park Tum Lights 2 00 3157 Front Side Marker Lights 2 4 168 Headlights 2 oc0 0208 cones PE mk H13 Stop Tail Turn Lights 2 00 3157 Underhood Light 0 0 0 0 000000 561 License Light asks debe paa Gk ed tes 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counter clockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position 10 Remove connec
67. optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 24 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so the correct mileage can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door indicates that a door s may be ajar gATE if the swing gate is open or ajar gASCAP which indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged CHANGE OIL indicates that the engine oil should be change ESPOFF indicates that ESP is turned off and noFUSE indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power Module will display in the odom eter es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Change
68. radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current s
69. should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated positions as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free sy
70. tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automati cally when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Power Outlets ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CUP HOLDERS In the center console there are two cup holders for the WARNING front seat passengers Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power NOTE The front cup holder insert is removable for from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cleaning cellular phones etc Eventually if pl
71. the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped gt II e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to s
72. time setting will change each time you press the HOUR or MIN soft key 6 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Changing the Time Zone 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Set Time Zone soft key on the face of the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 3 Select the appropriate time zone for your location and press the SAVE soft key to store your selection NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new time zone the clock must be reset manually for the new zone Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Daylight Savings soft key when Daylight Savings Time is in effect 3 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Press the CANCEL soft key to exit from the clock setting mode SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED REQ AND RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the fa
73. to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate com puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your AENRINTIN EY foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Loc
74. to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage WARNING In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage i can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These de
75. vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not e
76. 00 298 DITES L2 n aem 68b ox ERROR EIC RR RE 306 426 Au Pressure 4 222 2492 09 4456 307 Alignment and Balance lle 313 Chains ieres aereo BS hohe Ati td aa E 313 Changing s as pera enge dye tira d eode do aes 352 General Information llle 306 High Speedo eset eo tease dum eos 309 Inflation Pressures llle 307 Jacking cesse rh act io alae am Kom 8 352 353 Load Capacty eke Rs 302 303 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 315 Pressure Warning Light 204 Quality Grading 0 00000 426 Radial eee ey et Rea E eb es 310 Replacement i23 dc ex basa dade tee 312 Rotations ss ch cabdareviieisea eters 314 Salei akane ce stain esos ie ie tones a 298 SIZES iowa ek PR A eR ate ee ML R A 299 Spare Due ergi eeann uero etu S oes adeb 353 SPINNING sud esed ed ones ores one hod 310 Tread Wear Indicators 005 310 lo Open Hood i v ee oe Sa a ele 90 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 337 Torque Converter Clutch 00 277 Tow Hooks Emergency sese 358 TOWING ce wins ce x ace Ie i CUR ROS eoe 329 358 Disabled Vehicle llle 358 en INDEX 445 Gude hatch tence an a as ai cun ar AES 334 Recreational 44 caw ach od Saad RES 344 WEIL c chs bi ented Gok Moe t dep epe des dri a 334 Trac Lok Rear Axle llle 282 Traction Control 0 0 00 es 101 Traction Control Light 00 208 Trailer Tow
77. 00000 eee 391 Fabric Cate ios Behar ok WuEe as 393 395 Fabric Tops sacs fia nenne IRAE seen 395 Filters Air Cleaner i 4 pod x PERS DES S DC Rd 373 Engine Fuel uds RR RR eae We 372 Engine Oil 42523 dete tee A 369 Finish Cate xo ie o i a Boao eee EA Go Ale 391 Flashers Hazard Warning esteen sagaene s 350 Tum Signal 22 eww er 201 406 407 en INDEX 435 Flooded Engine Starting 265 Fluid Capacities cech ma ere A aa eee eS 408 Fluid Level Checks 0 0 0 0 00000 eae 389 Automatic Transmission 385 Engine Oil izzucazs c ur ER 367 Manual Transmission sss 388 Power Steering isses eene 375 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 409 Fog Light Service oou esee cole bined ees 406 Fog Lights oss sas pee per E RR s 94 406 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 00 85 Folding Rear Seat 1 2 0 0 eee eee 88 Folding Windshield 1 25222 re 185 Four Wheel Drive leen 278 SNE seras araea Ed ede reru eu x e 280 Four Wheel Drive Operation 278 Four Way Hazard Flasher 350 Front Axle Differential lesen 389 Fuel 4 2 ur RPRPSSUS EE ee ER ee ard 320 Filler Cap Gas Cap 00000004 325 Piter m 372 Gasoline cu Sad be UEFAS Gob RE pap 320 Gauge versn qst dg 3 ae eos Y ae eM ete 200 Materials Added 000005 322 Octane Rating eek te bee ee wa tag aes 320 Requireme
78. 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Compass Variance Zone Map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about 5 seconds then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation NOTE The US Metric display will change from En glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears however it will revert back to its original setting after programming the compass func tions COMPASS VARIANCE MAP 8040bf97 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Outside Temperature If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 C the display will show 131 F 55 C When the outside tem perature is less than 40 F 40 C the display will show 40 F 40 C RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to var
79. 339 WARNING e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P Park With a manual transmission shift the trans mission into 1st gear And with four wheel drive ve hicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neu tral Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3
80. 7 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Automatic 4WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 321 4 Door Sahara Model 5 481 Ibs 2 486 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 4WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 373 4 Door Sahara Model 7 981 Ibs 3 620 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Manual 4WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 3 3 4 Door Sahara Model 8 027 Ibs 3 641 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 Ibs 159 Automatic 4WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 4 10 4 Door Rubicon 8 059 Ibs 3 655 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Manual Model 4WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 4 10 4 Door Rubicon 8 104 Ibs 3 676 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Automatic Model 4WD square meters 587 kg kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of con
81. 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Radial Ply Tires WARNING WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
82. 981 or 1991 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location 4 Door Models Tire Placard Location 2 Door Models STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Tire and Loading Information Placard Loading di The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you 2 adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 3 Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of this manual SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS ARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg QR TIRE ER ORIGINAL TI COLD INFLATION PRE SPARE T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing see the Vehicle Loading section of this manual SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 2 the total weight your vehicle can
83. A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication A
84. Ae eae ERUR dU E 372 lu ID M 70 Phone Cell lat 4 222 eee ER e UD S 81 Phone Hands Free UConnect 81 Placard Tire and Loading Information 303 Polishing and Waxing 00 391 Power Distribution Center Fuses 397 Door LOCKS sakes ne ek a te bale Re 30 STEENS osea Tace qae oS esi edd 296 375 WindOoWs in pee Re eS Pte Ge ba 33 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 Preparation for Jacking 06 353 Pretensioners Seat Belts Js oe dats Eee ds dE cs ahs 45 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 21 Radial Ply lites ee be eee dete RR 310 Radio Broadcast Signals en INDEX 441 Radio Navigation 0000000 243 Radio Operation se cc erre os eal eS 250 Radio Satellite llle 244 245 Rear Axle Differential llle 389 Rear Swing Gate 2 66s les cee hn cee ea es 35 Rear Window Defroster 000005 192 Rear Window Features llle 191 Rear Wiper Washer ies 191 Rearview Mirrors llle 79 Recorder Event Data llle 56 Recreational Towing llle 344 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 345 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 346 Reformulated Gasoline less 321 Refrigerant vice EI dons haia ES 375 Release Hood 0 0 0c cee ee 90 Reminder Lights ON 1 42 4 cni Gaeta eg 93 Reminder Sea
85. DD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Once a Month At Each Oil Change e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or e Change the engine oil filter damage e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake CAUTION master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check the manual transmission fluid level e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Cc Rotate tires 6 000 10 000 6 E If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty S or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 C filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 D Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using
86. E ME Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If thelever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multi function control lever and move the wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph 56 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving 818f547e Speed Control Switches 98 UNDERS
87. G AND OPERATING ME Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Ignition Key Positions Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 If Engine Fails to Start Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the WARNING Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the the way to the floor
88. GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 340 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the ires General Information section of this manual for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section for proper tire replacement proce dures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped wit
89. J11 30 Amp Sway Bar Natural Pink J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD Main J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window Green tem ABS Pump Green Defogger Feed ESP J15 30 Amp Rear Blower J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Pink Pink tem ABS Valve J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Feed ESP Green J8 ES J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Yellow Module PCM Trans Green Feed Flex Fuel Range J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Pink Relay Manifold Tun Yellow ing Valve J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Yellow Yellow J22 Spare M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow Equipped Blue Stop Light CHMSL M10 20Amp Ignition Off Draw Switch Stop Lamp Yellow Vehicle Entertainment Feed System IOD VES M2 20 Amp Relay Trailer Lighting Satellite Digital Audio Yellow Stop en om Hands Free M3 UEM n Rear Axle Locker Module HFM RA Say DIO Antenna ANT M4 Universal Garage M5 Door Opener M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain UGDO Vanity Lamp Yellow Sensor VANITY LP M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Yellow BATT ACC SELECT
90. Jeep OWNER S MANUAL SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek mex m Uer EP ceew e eile oe e x ENERE EENET E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee t tmn 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 ccc eecc cece een 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cc cece cer cere eer hh hh hr hh e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece eee c cece cece cece eee hh hh mnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eeeeeeeeeeehh hh hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece ccc c ccc c eee hh hh mtn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 0c ccc cccccccccccecvcceevcesvcesvces 10 INDEX Op EET INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E introduction 0 000 000 0000 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 8 Mi Rollover Warning 6 6 eee 5 Bi Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 Bi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure
91. Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the system you will need to press the Un lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or turn the ignition key to the RUN position If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the system You may also acciden tally disarm the system by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediatel
92. M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Pump DSL LIFT Natural ASD 1 and 2 PUMP Export M20 15Amp Cabin Compartment Only Blue Node Interior Light M26 CCN INT LIGHT M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Feed yee Bank SW Red Wireless Module M28 10 Amp PCM Feed TCM M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Red Yellow ASD 3 M29 m 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Module HVAC MOD Headlamp Wash HDLP WASH Compass COMPAS Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M30 15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Blue J1962 Diagnostic Feed Red M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U M36 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow LAMPS Yellow M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Red Controller ORC TT Red tem ABS Electronic EUROPE Stability Program M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con ESP Stop Lamp Red troller NGC Global Switch STP LP SW Powertrain Engine Fuel Pump Rly Hi Controller GPEC Control M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Red ASST Heater Ventila Natural LOCK UNLOCK tion Air Conditioning MTRS ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 VEHICLE STORAGE SRUTIONE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 e When installing the Integrated Power Module days you may want to take steps to protect your battery cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop
93. N have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the Malfunction Indicator Light may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash any time the ESP or TCS is active and helping to improve vehicle stability If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 27 OID Overdrive Off Indica
94. N nd gat 368 Speed Control Cruise Control 97 Speedometer irse Hose abe OR ae ES 200 rig m 263 Automatic Transmission ls 263 Cold Weather x ansXeexa desa RNEER 264 Engine Block Heater 05 267 Engine Fails to Start aesan stom 265 Manual Transmission iss 263 REMO Logs Lowa RS EE Peete S 24 Steering POWEP i49 e RAS ERes REESE 296 375 Tilt Colum ous ce up OW eae ei ES 96 Wheel Lock is ess m 13 Wheel Tilt lese eR Re Rem 96 Stor g ime c RERO e ea es a 112 403 Storage Behind the Seat 113 Storage Vehicle sooo es 257 403 Storing Your Vehicle ses dreie nie anien EEEa 403 SUNTIGCH dude ae E qu Pda es 155 158 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 47 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 284 owing Gate Rear aae eka dora Wak ace aora i System Navigation etere mestas 0 000 aees System Remote Starting 44 INDEX ME Tachometer sesca vue eet nos we as ae ed 203 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 203 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 Theft System Arming esse 18 Theft System Disarming lesse 18 Tilt Steering Column i eaea eana e a 96 Tip Start iieri ur RR Rd enp eR 264 Tire and Loading Information Placard 302 303 Tire Identification Number TIN 301 Tire Markings essi Re RR vimentin ees 298 Tire Safety Information
95. NSUMER ASSISTANCE EBENEN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak tr
96. NTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L FUSES INTEGRATED AUTOMATIC ENGINE OIL ENGINEOIL BRAKE FLUID POWER MODULE BATTERY TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK FILL DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER COOLANT AIR CLEANER COOLANT WASHER STEERING FLUID PRESSURE CAP FILTER BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE 8191f0ee ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con ver
97. OPERATION COMMAND TRAC OR ROCK TRAC IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions two rear wheel drive high range four wheel drive high range neutral and four wheel drive low range 4WD Shift Controls This transfer case is intended to be driven in the two wheel drive 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the events when additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together This light illuminates when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshafts speeds must be equal
98. PANEL 203 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped REN Indicates when the rear axle lock has been Q activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi wee tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator Light If Equipped Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System or Vehicle Security Alarm in Section 2 of this manual 18 Coolant Temperature Gauge E Indicates engine coolant temperature The red T zone to the far right indicates possible overheat ing Seek authorized service immediately if the gauge operates in the red zone In U S vehicles tempera ture is indicated in degrees fahrenheit in Canadian vehicles in degrees centigrade 19 Cruise Indicator Light cruise Tris light shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 20 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
99. R AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE Theradio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability RER combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of desti nations and routes 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME This radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position 2 If the radio is off turn it on by pressing the ON OFF Volume radio knob 3 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 4 Press the HOUR or MIN soft keys on the face of the radio 5 The
100. S VITER LES MANOEUVRES ABRUPTES ET LA VITESSE EXCESSIVE PORTER TOUJOURS LES CEINTURES DE S CURIT CONSULTER LE GUIDE DE L AUTOMORILISTE POUR DE PLUS AMPLES RENSEIGNEMENTS AUN CON SISTEMAS AVANZADOS A ADVERTENCIA DE BOLSA DE AIRE ALTO RIESGO DE A ADVERTENCIA VoLCAMIENTO LA BOLSA DE AIRE PUEDE CAUSAR SERIOS DA OS O LA MUERTE A LOS NINOS EL ASIENTO DE ATR S ES EL LUGAR MAS SEGURO FARA LOS NI OS SIEMPRE USE LOS CINTURONES DE SEGURIDAD Y SISTEMAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA NINOS PARA MAS INFORMACION SOBRE BOLSA DE AIRE CONSULTE EL MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO NUNCA PONGA UN ASIENTO DE NI O CON LA CARA HACIA ATRAS EN EL ASIENTO DELANTERO EVITE MANIOBRAS ABRUPTAS Y VELOCIDAD EXCESIVA USE SIEMPRE EL CINTURON DE SEGURIDAD PARA MAYOR INFORMACION VER MANUAL DEL PROPIETARIO CD cur on0aa 819128e1 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seal belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detail
101. S OF YOUR VEHICLE M 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the on the side bows above the front doors They should side bow until it rests on the windshield frame cradle the tubing Finally make sure that the check strap the long woven strap reaching from the rear bow to the 2 bow does not get entangled in any of the framework when unfolding the top AN E 9 Before attaching the header latches be sure the top retainers above the doors do not get trapped between the top and the door frame Also make certain the feet at both ends of the 2 bow forward most bow seat properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 10 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 11 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them StbStebe by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior 12 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last three 3 inches towards the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 4 bo
102. Seat 2 Door Models 88 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat 4 Door Models exu RES eins eon ghee eons 88 To Raise The Rear Seat 0 89 ll To Open And Close The Hood 90 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Eo Ss 91 Windshield Wiper Operation 95 Interior Lights 0 6 eee 91 Windshield Washers 0005 96 Multi Function Control Lever 92 Mist Feature 6 eee 96 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And a Tilt Steering Column caceace e RE RR Rn xs 96 PSG ee dede a ue ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 97 Eee eH IE chased bod i nd tk Oe 2 lo Activate 25 bere o4 hx DE bg eteme 98 m LE a To Set At A Desired Speed o oo uo onoo 98 PANE DEME akon evant areal dandi i To Deactivate cane aee eee ner 98 o e a Et od d the cree 25 To Resume Speed 2255 4 bx dees 99 T r Signals 52 3 nes wie oh SS rg 94 To Vary The Speed Setting sse 99 M id M o NM E did Manual Transmission llle 99 pa A e Sa PROCESOS VISSER distet d To Accelerate For Passing 100 Intermittent Wiper System ls 95 ll Electronic Brake Control System 100 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
103. T PANEL ME rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 LIST Butto
104. TANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator light will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON
105. TING ME Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more information RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear drive shaft is removed See your authorized dealer or refer to the Service Manual Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage en STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Towing 4WD Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral for recreational towing Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is nece
106. TING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odom eter area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE GAS CAP NOFUSE or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors glove box swing gate and console storage Manual Door Locks The front 2 Door Models and rear doors 4 Door Models are equipped with a rocker type interior door lock To lock a door when leaving your vehicle press to the Lock position and close the door Manual Door Lock 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave chil
107. VEHICLE 367 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines ADD OIL MARK FULL RANGE MARK d 80c0715e 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for recommended engine oil change intervals En
108. Weight 337 Towing Requirements liess 338 Towing TIPS 22 4ceace hes ada dr aem eased 343 ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 344 Towing 2WD Models 344 Towing 4WD Models 345 Shifting Out Of Neutral N sss 346 es STARTING AND OPERATING 263 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever in N Neutral and depress the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor 4WD Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to depress the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the selector lever in the N Neutral or P Park position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range 264 STARTIN
109. a Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 CAUTION WARNING e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Section 7 of this manual It contains important infor mation on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top frame work when opening or closing Damage to the top may result unless side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury du
110. action Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in system functions similar to a limited slip differential and cluding those resulting from excessive speed in controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck that is not spinning This feature remains active even if less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off user s safety or the safety of others modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The sy
111. action characteristics ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 430 INDEX ME ABS Anti Lock Brake System 202 294 Adding Fuel 224i 325 Adding Washer Fluid 0000 192 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 373 Air Conditioner Maintenance 374 Air Conditioning clem ee iapa 252 256 Air Conditioning Controls 256 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 256 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 375 Air Condition
112. age inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature al
113. alve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted in the fuel tank may be necessary es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 dopo Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for recommended ERES Engine Air Cleaner Filter change intervals Battery posts terminals and related accessories con WARNING tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless CAUTION it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive Maintenance Free Battery and negative and identified on the battery case Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance fr
114. ance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service Atthe mileage indicated in the Maintenance Schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
115. ands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the front door frame 3 Pull the frame towards you with your front hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 4 Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame at tachment knob on the rear door frame ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 5 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the rear door frame Pull the frame towards you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 6 Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location 81924c19 WARNING e Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation 4 Door Models pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 1 Install the rear door frame first 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport b
116. ange operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and WARNING before you return to on road driving Both you and your Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and personal injury off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield or folded down down f Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is Outside rear view mirrors are mounted on the doors If securely fastened either up or down you choose to remove the doors see your authorized Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror times when the windshield is down Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for on road use raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all asso ciated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to fol low these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident
117. ant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se matic locking retractor identified by a distinctive label vere or fatal injury to the infant The seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not All seating positions except for driver have a auto necessary to use a locking clip For the seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode ear lier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child
118. ar and press onto the side bar making sure not to 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield Then clip the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that 6 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the knob long knob Then install the middle knob short door frame Position the rear of the front door frame to knob through the front and rear door frames and screw lay on top of the front of the rear door frame into the top of the b pillar 7 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP 2 DOOR MODELS CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm are
119. ase of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experi enced work the Mopar Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located Integrated Power Module TIPM in the engine compartment near the battery This center Cavity Cartridge Mini Description contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label Fuse Fuse that identifies each component is printed on the inside of JA the cover J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module Pink B 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node
120. at such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on
121. at your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please cal
122. ation RIGHT STOP TURN Ei LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN mie PINS PARK O GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the O D OFF range should be selected NOTE Using O D OFF while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips O D Off To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing select the O D OFF feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section 344 STARTING AND OPERA
123. auge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear stora j g wrenc e locate e rear storage WARNING compartment Refer to Storage in Section 3 of this manual e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Spare Tire Stowage To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking Park on a firm level s
124. be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire 320 STARTING AND OPERATING and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered
125. ble with the antifreeze coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolants Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolants is not recommended 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant When adding antifreeze coolant e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occur
126. c transmission fluid main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped 120 000 200 000 120 M A N T E Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N Change the automatic transmission fluid amp main d sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the follow 60 000 100 000 60 c ing police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing E Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for S any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 C quent trailer towing H Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 E Replace the ignition cables 3 8L Only 102 000 170 000 102 U Replace the spark plugs 3 8L Only 102 000 170 000 102 5 S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Bi Reporting Safety Defects 05 423 Vehicle iu m REESE REX ex 420 e NT O 424 Prepare For The Appointment 1 420 Bl Publication Order Forms 000 424 Pr pare A EISES io dcs ee aati a EEA 420 ll
127. carry vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The and spare tires 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ib 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to
128. ch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the switch down to lock the rear axle the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the switch up to unlock the rear axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls es STARTING AND OPERATING 285 when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system
129. chors 64 65 Child S at i 408i d ps d 3X gb basi Oe ae 63 Climate Control aee creii ae ea 00000 250 Clock 65 6584 vagaia ERR a E BERS 218 230 244 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 249 COMPASS sso hue dda a euer dece nag dae 210 Compass Calibration 000050 212 Computer Trip Travel 209 210 Corisole esa ease me ste at eae ee Xo eA a QR 112 Console Floor lees 112 Contract Service lees 422 Converter Catalytic i266 i00 sis ee RE ses 370 Cooling System s 25 25 te da hucye EORR Ns 378 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 380 Coolant Capacity iss ks race mrenea spaka 408 Coolant Level 00 ecra di eee eee 381 Disposal of Used Coolant 381 Drain Flush and Refill 379 InspectiOn sx hd DAKE REDE ORR KR RRO 378 Points to Remember sls 382 Pr ssute Cap cdd dades Sk pane dabei NRI 380 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 379 408 Temperature Gaup Esis siet ANERE 203 Corrosion Protection sews rastnega aiy Ea eevee 390 Crankcase Emission Control System 372 Crise Light e 5 cs beer 9 Re eR Ra 203 Cup Holder 22 228 cer e Re eR ces 111 Customer Assistance llle 420 Data Recorder Event llle 56 Daytime Running Lights 94 Dealer Service 0 0 0 ee eee 366 Defroster Rear Window 192 Defroster Windshield
130. cking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button The rear head restraints are not adjustable ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold seatback for Adjustable Head Restraints Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2 Door Models NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats Rear Seat Release 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward Removing the Rear Seat 2 Door Models WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Folding Rear Seat 3 When completed return seat to it s normal position In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and floor attachments Always be sure that the seats firmly lock seat into position are fully latched e
131. cle Remove the bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 7 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store in center console or securely behind the rear seat 8 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the 6 black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 9 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers 10 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars 3 Attach front of side bar to windshield frame 1 Raise the windshield e Install top two 2 hex bolts 13mm first then lower side hex bolt 13mm Lower side bolt will not align until top two bolts are installed 2 Loosely attach rear of side bar to sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield and Removing Side Bars earlier in this section 819292b7 4 Tighten all side bar attachmen
132. croll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is
133. ctory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk li
134. d MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 412 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 00 0 412 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the
135. d mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road usage the side step if equipped should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove two 2 nuts from bodyside 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Remove one 1 bolt from underside of vehicle 3 Remove side step assembly When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift to 4L Low for additional traction and control on slipp
136. d around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO But
137. de bow behind the header and lift 5 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the top the header on top of the rear portion of the deck ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 6 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form 8 Secure the top by using the two 2 provided straps a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to into two folds Ensure that the straps are securely stowed itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle Ios 8192842d 7 Close the front header latches To Close Perform the above steps in the opposite order 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP 4 DOOR MODELS CAUTION e The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and
138. dren alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped The door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch downward to lock the doors and upward to unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en E abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in N Neutral or P Park 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Au
139. duce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Fuel System Cautions e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these CAUTION products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not performance the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal systems can result in civil penalties being assessed law Using leaded gasoline can impair
140. e 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds a
141. e Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support top from underneath 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se RINSING Be sure to remove all trace of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it Care Of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching Removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provide UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain e
142. e Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the Unlock button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off by performing the following steps 1 Press the Lock button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the Lock button is pressed after 4 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system
143. e conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain and or more frequent downshifts auto transmission only may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING TCS Tr
144. e eR RERO 33 Programming Additional Transmitters 21 Power Windows If Equipped 33 General Information lille 22 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 0 2 0 ae 35 Battery Replacement seus ce one ansa 23 Rear Swing Gate erect See Ean 35 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 BW Occupant Restraints i i e 37 MD00tS 4 2252 40 che S280 eee eee ease 26 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 38 Front Door Removal 0 0 0 0 26 Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Rear Door Removal 4 Door Models 27 ua Doon Mode Only E 49 BM Door Locks i o Ry 29 BODDODE DOS Bet OSIISICHOIR QE ces Vimus eui dae ccm E EM 29 Seat Belt Pretensioners ean astawa 45 Power Door Locks If Equipped sce Eoo seccion N Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 31 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 46 AOR AC a eee ree Sane dd unii 9 Seat Belt Extender llle 47 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Exhaust Gas s rere reyr e Sara da ew RUE es 71 Restraint Systems SRS 0 00 0 47 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Child Restraint sss gcc cose asi ti at ae 58 Vehicle 22 Savers 2 ei veran EUMSFPAS SANA Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 71 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The WM Safety Tips 6 ccssat ene kei aw EXE 71 RU s codon aie Fou MON Ue
145. e first loops on the windshield three 3 inches of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rear ward out of the swing gate brackets 5 Open the swing gate 81b34aa7 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 7 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 8 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window 9 Once unzipped remove side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 10 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 11 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 13 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the winds
146. e should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi
147. e to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeatedly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors igni tion after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Sentry Key Security Alarm Indicator
148. eat xus d Oa COR RR Rae RR aw 8 38 Body Mechanism Lubrication 376 Brake Assist System 00 00 00 0c aee 102 Brake Assist Warning Light 209 Brake Control System Electronic 100 Brake System erani dga retede waia ena a 383 Anti Lock ABS 00005 100 294 FOSES Ludi ee Ry nee besa eae 384 Master Cylinder sics exec eee ges 384 Parking icto tede yd E ate 292 Warning Light 2 9 0 eer Pee ER 202 Brake Transmission Interlock 273 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 71 Bulb Replacement 0 004 404 405 Capacities Fluid ice bere dake Kees 408 Caps Filler Fieles cba hee ese RENE Ree ke en 3p 325 Power Steering eee 375 Car Washes wis spein Toe Lea E 391 Carbon Monoxide Warning 324 Cargo Light ii ses eS ede eae eenias 91 Catalytic Converter 2 0 6 0 eee eee 370 Caution Exhaust Gas 0 0 00 c eee 71 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 249 Cellular Phone 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 81 250 Center High Mounted Stop Light 407 Certification Label eese se nie Rees 327 Chains Deb dro qued es aes a 313 Changing A Flat Tie 52e irre IRE 352 Charging System Light 0 200 Chart Tire Dizing 5 222 eee RR RI 299 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 432 INDEX ME Child Restraint sess 58 59 65 68 Child Restraint Tether An
149. ebbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seat back Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behi
150. ed climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh
151. ed in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assembly re placed by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure You need proper knee impact protection in a colli sion Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an
152. ed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual D OO X WATER IN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE AS Xx j i Q7 t FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH ets oes P Et t 4 ND n FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT WASHER FLUID LEVEL WINOSHIELO ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION PN GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUID AND WASHER C b E AIRBAG oh on MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ED 7 of amp X BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE zD gt l RS zx z 0 BRAKE SYSTEM LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILLDESCENT WARNING PARKING POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE L4 4 A 2 s awor e Cv FRONTFOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING
153. ee battery Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the You will never have to add water nor is periodic main vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before tenance required connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance 7 WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts NOTE Use only manufacturer approved
154. egrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in tray Rear Storage Cover 3 Open rear compartment cover 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing The Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the 2 boxes that contain the following items Right and left door frames Door frame attachment knobs 4 for 2 door models 6 for 4 door models Right and left quarter windows Rear window Rear window roll up straps 2 Sunrider secure straps 2 If Equipped Rear swing gate brackets 2 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top 3 Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket 4 Using a rubber mallet carefully tap the knuckles from screws 2 per side using a T30 Torx head driver the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the sof
155. election Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits
156. elf check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag
157. els completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure th
158. em TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light to be turned off The system w
159. emperature Control Use this control right rotary knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode 81915f2a Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort
160. er under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 WARNING High Range AWD Models or 2WD Models On ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD high natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle range and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing started or the transfer case if equipped is shi
161. ery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system automatic transmission models only which will allow the vehicle to be started from distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood swing gate and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 81931ecc Remote Start Transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the Remote Start button once The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is running The lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the Unlock button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked
162. ery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches The flowing water can erode the strea
163. evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h systems will not engage to assist in maintaining After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph 56 Stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode off road use only NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any position other than P Park and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4WD Low Range ESP Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD high range or neutral to AWD low range the ESP system will be in this mode In 4WD low range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 48 km h At 40 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 40 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4WD low range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 48 km h The ESP
164. f your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure m and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Modul
165. following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heater Only The controls for the heating ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions Manual Heater Control es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary m
166. for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mm e Level 1 12 including a separator 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times i mm 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128
167. for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times four times for Rubicon mod els that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position Rear Wheel Drive High Range Normal street and highway driving Hard surfaced roads 4H Position Four Wheel Drive High Range
168. fted from road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in 4WD low range or neutral back to 4WD high range the cluding those resulting from excessive speed in ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro used for most all driving situations ESP should only be planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP as noted below equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the ESP TCS The ESP system has 3 available operating modes in 4WD Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability High Range The system has 1 operating mode in 4WD features of ESP function normally This mode is intended Low Range 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2WD _ to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel mode have 2 operating modes user s safety or the safety of others 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Co
169. g the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Win dows WASHING Use Mopar Car Wash or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required us
170. gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned In moderate to severe side collisions the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and fro
171. ger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be tween you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Airbag System Components Lea The airbag system consists of the following e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more e Occupant Restraint Control Module E severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all e Driver Airbag Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Airbag Warning Light Passenger Airbag Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous
172. gine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity 3 8L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s perform
173. gned before zipping to prevent damage 22 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel 20 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 23 Open the doors and insert the top retainers into the 24 Ensure plastic retainer is tucked in properly at channels in the door frame above the doors starting at B pillar not pinching seal the front and work toward the rear of the vehicle 81926539 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 25 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low r
174. h a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 342 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a 4 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustr
175. he gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle Damage to the fuel system or EDSON control sys If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement tem could result from using an improper fuel cap cap is for use with this vehicle gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system CAUTION A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on 8191324e Fuel Filler Cap 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a p
176. hed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve
177. heel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the move the vehicle steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel CAUTION With the engine running rotate the steering wheel 1 2 revolution from straight ahead position turn off the An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel Always remove the key from the ignition and lock slightly in both directions until the lock engages all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will
178. heir covers are also labeled SRS Side Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you caus ing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation Do not store or place items under the front seats You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver a
179. hen in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pre
180. hicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 ete ear a alee Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and WOESE pull towards you until the seat back releases Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into To Raise the Rear Seat position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 1 Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt please make sure your seatback is fully latched 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open hood first release both hood latches 818f406e Hood Latch Next locate handle in middle of the front end of the hood Insert hand into gap between hood and top of grille and push handle to the side to raise
181. hicles used for trailer towing 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The Gross Trailer Weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded Yo
182. hield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward Sunrider proceed to Step 16 while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage 3192507d es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 14 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid forward over 15 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider the Sunrider link Sunrider Models Only Models Only 81c65d28 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x 16 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center mounted brake lamp Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle 17 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle When the top is completely down position the drip rails so they make a v shape this prevents damage to the soft top material 18 Close front header latches 19 Remove door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Putting Up The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 Sail Panel 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Plastic Retainer 10
183. his feature The rear passenger window switches if equipped are located on the back of the center floor console Pus Ves d SA Rear Power Window Switches 4 Door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Window Lockout Switch 4 Door Models Only The window lockout switch located between the win dow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word gATE as an indica tion of when the swing gate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the swing gate is not completely closed the VF display will show the word SATE If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear swing gate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After thi
184. i your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent 18 000 30 000 18 E trailer towing S Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months 23000 AUG di Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months PUn UR zii 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 Check the PCV valve replace if necessary Perform the first inspection at 60 000 miles 100 000 km or 60 30 000 50 000 30 months Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more then 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 50 000 30 30 000 50 000 30 M A l N U E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Change the automati
185. ify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Lock Out 4 Door Models Only Lock Out 4 Door Models Only WARNING This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seat back is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seat back is not fully latched The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seat back is not fully upright and locked NOTE and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately out check that the rear seat back is fully latched be taken to your dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury e If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able
186. ight bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure NOTE A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 feet 1 meter They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second Windshield Wiper Operation Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed wiper operation or to the third detent for HI speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICL
187. ill automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to SAUNON approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This ure pressure is The TPMS has been optimized for the original sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause been established for the tire size equipped on your the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads i
188. imately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L of fuel remain NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on for three seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light comes back on immediately or comes on while driving it means that there is a problem with the charging system or the battery is low Also a chime will sound if the light comes back on See your authorized dealer immediately 3 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped 40 This light shows when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator Light If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT g activated 7 Seat Belt Indicator Light A warning chime and an indicator light will alert K you to buckle the seat belts When the belt is buckled the chime wil
189. ing 6 ee 329 Cooling System Tips 005 344 Hitch S 222296 ea Huy poe awe RR 320 333 Minimum Requirements 05 338 Trailer and Tongue Weight 337 WHINE ssas eec penes ek en Oa RO aed es 342 Trailer Towing Guide 0040 334 Trader Weight itunes Bh ae wae 334 Transfer Case ca 4 394 dd Ad Mn eos ate RS 388 Four Wheel Drive Operation 278 Maintenance llle 388 Transmission Automalle scce sasat eoo eae nee aad paras 273 Maintenance eee 385 387 Matitiall aaeeea ze raza oda e a ep es 267 Range Indicator 2 54 446 44 RE epe 204 SHINE custo or mee RR eem 271 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 00004 23 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00 21 Transporting Pets 70 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0000 310 Trip Computer ies eee eg 209 210 Trip Odometer vk RR reer aes 206 Trip Odometer Reset Button 204 Turn Signals sss s ERR 94 201 406 407 UConnect Hands Free Phone 81 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 426 Upholstery Care x emere 393 446 INDEX MM Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 005 383 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading ise nes 303 327 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage eese 257 403 Viscosity Engine Oil 2 0 0 ee eee eee 368
190. ing x pe bs dad LIPLOSRPPE EE 393 Easy Entty ess 26 Sah ba ee Oa RR Rc e t eai 83 Fold and Tumble Rear 85 Head Restraints 0 0 0 eee 84 Height Adjustment 0000 82 Rear Folding 434 E 844 qp b part as 88 Removal lees 86 88 Seatback Release llle 83 Ting enta bise OR eas RU oe Pede sts 83 Security Against Theft llle 17 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Oil llle 368 Sentry Key Immobilizer llle 14 Sentry Key Programming llle 16 Sentry Key Replacement lille 15 Service Assistance 0 0 cee eee ee 420 Service COnttact vua PEERS EERE i 422 Service Manuals eee eee 424 Setting the Clock occa sue eee nn 218 230 244 Shift Lock Manual Override 272 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 269 SN ih pi arate teas uit adh wide cud 271 en INDEX 443 Automatic Transmission Ls 273 Manual Transmission liess 267 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 44 Shoulder Belts nier eR eR RIEF ERG 38 Side Airbag isa x 9 e ees 53 Signals Tutti cicer ese ems 94 201 406 407 Snow Chains Tire Chains 313 Soft TOP cete beh eme be mea 134 162 Spare IUe ius dudes a ebat d sb x ds 353 Spark PIUgS os ise tha oie Oke athe aera E 370 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 1 0 ee 320 Oil siege e RR RE RE
191. ing Down The Soft Top 0 136 Bats sd iss a6 4 arte Bb binge dried Wh SUR BRS Me SULA 187 Putting Up The Soft Top Beceem E Sunrider 2 Door Models 155 li Rear Window Postuies Had Tap Only cc 191 H Sunrider 4 Door Models sn 158 Risa Window Wiper Washer IE Equipped 191 ll Soft Top 4 Door Models 162 Boss Window Delosttr Me Equipped e ccs 192 Folding Down The Soft Top 164 Putting Up The Soft Top 174 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjusting Rearview Mirror Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s ESEINUMNES to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror e Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to co
192. ing System 256 Air Filter Vere raus bg Peo ee eas ates soe hes 373 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 00 ec ee eeee 307 Airbag 2e pre dedu ea ie P ERES 47 Airbag Deployment 000000005 54 Airbag Light 24s se eI SUR 56 202 Airbag Maintenance llle 55 Airbag Side asa ie os thru re b eR 53 Alarm Security Alarm 000 17 Alignment and Balance Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio LLL 246 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 408 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 100 294 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 202 Appearance Care sig ses FERE qaae 390 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Auto Down Power Windows sss 34 Automatic Transmission scs cseteris rrii 385 Fluid and Filter Changes 385 Fluid Level Check 23 03 40 00000 eera ses 385 Fluid Type iuste RR dees teens buns 385 Gear Ranges 45 924 9 piger 274 SHINE x nssencewcee GE Neu RS 273 Special Additives 345 v Ere ae 387 Torqu Converter 1 2 ag ergo E en e 277 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 110 Auxiliary Power Outlet 00 110 Axle Lock 2 2 d e yeux 283 284 en INDEX 431 Battery aces xac RR RO ae Ke Ka neang ant 373 Emergency Starting 0 0 6 0 ee eee eee 355 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 Belts Drive lt iste bx ex RE ea ge eS 370 Belts S
193. instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Description section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the A
194. ion into D Drive or release clutch on manual transmissions NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral on automatic transmission equipped vehicles turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle es STARTING AND OPERATING 347 CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS H Hazard Warning Flashers 350 Preparations For Jacking 353 Milf Your Engine Overheats 351 Jacking Instructions 004 353 H Jacking And Tire Changing 352 W jump Starting 2 4 x eevee weve cae Jack Location 2432 5 b e0iee GR wa 3522 Hl Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Spare Tire Stowage 0 0000 353 Hi Towing A Disabled Vehicle 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency
195. ional Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual Overdrive O D For most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled 4th gear Overdrive and will automatically shift from D Drive to O D Overdrive if the following conditions are present e The transmission selector is in D Drive e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup Overdrive Off Switch 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console The O D OFF indicator light on the switch will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicator light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 1 First For hard pu
196. ions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The axle lock switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate Once the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles push the top of the switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se REAR AXLE LOCK 4WD NON RUBICON MODELS IF EQUIPPED The rear axle lock swit
197. ions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system S meets the seat back and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Latch Anchorages 2 Door Models Latch Anchorages 4 Door Models ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting 4 Door Models Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with Tether Strap Mounting 2 Door Models separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjuster
198. ird party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available Accordi
199. ire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Milimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions ie tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and osted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maxim
200. is 119 Monitor Tire Pressure System csoc ceses crases 315 Mopar Parts du aera ea a eR ees 366 423 Multi Function Control Lever 92 Navigation Radio 1 6 2 2 e e a e eee 243 Navigation System 0 0 0 0 0 00 cee 243 New Vehicle Break In Period Z1 Occupant Restraints sso ss coce mer D eee eee 37 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 320 Odometer a a iada E a ai a e gress 494 206 TH ose ere BP GE ee Le WE ES 204 206 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 287 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 287 Oil Change Indicator lille 207 Oil Change Indicator Reset 207 MUT MEC 367 Capacity 440 INDEX aa Dipstick as ien Spe git aad CR RUE a 367 Filtet icu err ede RR RR ACE 369 Identification Logo ociste aita basas 368 Materials Added to 00005 369 Pressure Warning Light 201 Recommendation sss 368 408 VISCOSILY css n Re Ree ye 368 408 Oil Pressure Light lt 2 cc ck cea bte ERES 201 Onboard Diagnostic System 363 364 Outside Rearview Mirrors 05 80 Overheating Engine 00 0000 351 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 424 Paint Care oie evade dose ROS SHS ERR Le NUR 390 Paint Damage iazeewe P8440 doe ed eae cred 390 Panic Alarm usus er Rp Repas 20 Parking Brake isis menire 48 24400748 294 292 Passing Light 6 eee ERR es 94 PCV Valve saratia neo
201. isfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated es STARTING AND OPERATING 307 2 Economy Tire Inflation Pressures Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Placard Location 2 Door Models 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ue Tire Placard Location 4 Door Models The pressur
202. itch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Area Max GTW Max Tongue Transmis Combined Wt Rat Gross Wt See sion ing Trailer Wt Note 1 3 8L 3 21 2 Door X Model 4 987 lbs 2 262 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 4WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 3 73 2 Door X Model 5 987 lbs 2 716 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Manual 4WD square meters 907 kg kg 3 8L 3 73 2 Door X Model 6 032 lbs 2 736 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Automatic 4WD square meters 907 kg kg 3 8L 321 2 Door Sahara Model 5 163 Ibs 2 342 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 4WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 373 2 Door Sahara Model 6 163 Ibs 2 795 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Manual 4WD square meters 907 kg kg 3 8L 373 2 Door Sahara Model 6 163 Ibs 2 795 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Automatic 4WD square meters 907 kg kg 3 8L 4 10 2 Door Rubicon 6 236 lbs 2 829 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Manual M
203. ith a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your ve hicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings Alignment and Balance Poor suspension alignment may result in e Fast tire wear e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear e Vehicle pull to right or left Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho rized dealer for proper diagnosis Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Install chains on rear tires only Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and excessive tire and chain wear e Use chains on P225 75R16 tires only P245 75R16 P255 75R17 P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only
204. k Brake System pump motor runs during on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the stop regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly During off road use loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition OFF and ON again to restore Anti Lock Brake System function 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must POWER STEERING n never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous The standard power steering system will give you good
205. l for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc Aa controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VASTE ADONE PE Worl Wide Neo ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com pealtocis and a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 426 IF YOU NEED CO
206. l stop but the light will stay on until it times out about 6 seconds 8 Turn Signal Indicator Lights The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE Shows low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 turned from the OFF to the ON position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on have the system checked by your autho rized dealer If the warning light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED Also a single chime will sound 10 High Beam Indicator Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or parklights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 11 Brake Warning Light After ignition is turned on illuminates to indicate BRAKE function check at vehicle start up Indicates park ing brake is applied If the light stays on whe
207. le WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV v
208. le Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Mittors oov ines pow eas YE GE merus 79 Inside Day Night Mirror 79 Outside Mirrors 2 0 000 ee eee 80 ll Hands Free Communication UConnect 81 Seats becca orb ERE RR RES 81 Front Seat Adjustment llle 82 Manual Seat Height Adjustment It Equipped uos ane haa Bima as 82 Front Seat Back Recline lilius 83 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models 54 43 xRERRGG EXTR eR GR ES 83 Head Restraints llle 84 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat 2 Door Models 85 Removing The Rear Seat 2 Door Models 86 Replacing The Rear
209. le provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze coolant needs to be added c
210. left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped 40 The front fog light switch is in the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signals Move the multi function control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside l
211. lid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Inserta blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of servic
212. ll driveline and steering components are sealed and do not require lubrication Driveshafts are not serviceable Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of c
213. ll result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 mi 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level
214. llide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Outside Rear View Mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect This feature is not available on Wrangler 2 Door or Wrangler Unlimited 4 Door models SEEK SCAN te Ce 9 MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL EL 81969789 Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone When you press this button a UConnect System Not Available message will display on your radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone When you press this button a UConnect System Not Available message will display on your radio screen SEATS O wmm Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Front Seat Adjustment Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Move seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever Be The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by sure the latch engages fully using the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on
215. lling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds WARNING Never use P Park position with an automatic trans mission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Torque Converter Clutch oN A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera Never race the engine with the brakes on and the tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an BE incline without applying the brakes These prac e Before moving the shift lever out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise damage to steering column or shifter could result tices can overheat and damage the transmission When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween D Drive and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
216. lon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the
217. lows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt t
218. lvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The push button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional electric remote con trol heated mirrors An amber x light shows that the defroster 81917942 19 ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten CAUTION minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the up Use care when washing the inside of the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating elements UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Mi Instrument Panel And Controls 198 Two Types Of Signals H Instrument Cluster 00000 199 Electrical Disturbances B Instrument Cluster Description 200 AM Reception sees neira creus saana 215 ll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 210 FM Reception se esee Rees ey eras 216 Control Buttons
219. m sealing by draining a small amount of antifreeze coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Discard old antifreeze coolant solution according to rec ommended procedure Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type CAUTION e Mixing of antifreeze coolants other than the speci fied HOAT antifreeze coolants may result in en gine damage and may decrease corrosion protec tion If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compati
220. mbed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef fects Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Use first gear and
221. monitors Sway Bar Switch vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the Press the sway bar switch to activate the system Press stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar 22 km h the system will once again attempt to Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or return to off road mode 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section and press the stabilizer sway bar button to obtain the off road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the stabilizer sway bar button again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on roa
222. n CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume do
223. n possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur 298 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY e AND STANDARDS a TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LI Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT en STARTING AND OPERATING 299 T
224. n 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode
225. n the parking brake is off it indicates a possible brake system fluid leak or low pressure level see your authorized dealer immediately If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is in motion the red BRAKE warning light will flash and a chime will sound The operation of the BRAKE warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 12 Anti Lock ABS Warning Light S After ignition is turned on illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to stan dard non anti lock brakes If both the red BRAKE warning light and the amber ABS warning light are on see your dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual 13 Airbag Warning Light This indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 Oo seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light does not come on for 6 to 8 seconds stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
226. n the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 81c74ba2 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats and t
227. n your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturn ing any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use standard seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to a greater risk of being thrown out of an open body vehicle than out of a closed vehicle in an accident which can result in injury or death Although your vehicle may be equipped with a soft top or optional hard top to give the occupants protection from the weather these tops do not offer structural protection in the event of an accident and do not change the open body characteristic of the vehicle Even though your vehicle has a sport bar and side bars for some extra protection it is a truly open vehicle there is no structural integrated top and it has low sides and a folding wind shield Many of the
228. nd front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passen
229. nd the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restrai
230. nd will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not
231. nds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF CD player mechanism a VEMM NOTE EBjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped umm SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the of the current selection or return to the beginning of the other side is a CD should not be used and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of can cause damage to the player the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the begi
232. ng system is en gaged 819160ac NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant t
233. ng to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg
234. nning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels
235. nstalled To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in towards the vehicle to disengage ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 14 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 15 Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form the header on top of the rear portion of the deck a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x 16 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 17 Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to the door frame track to the rear door frame disengage Repeat this step on the other side TE 81926dc3 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to 20 Once the top is fully down use the straps used to prevent possible damage to the rear center mounted secure the top in the Sunrider position Wrap the straps brake lamp Gently slide the side bows off the door frame around the side bows and through the slot on the track and lower the top down into the vehicle bodyside retainer and Velcro back onto itself Ensure that the top is secure HE 19 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle
236. nt and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle The rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the direct
237. nt passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involv
238. ntrol Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP Control Switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP Off AWD High Range Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP Control Switch for 5 seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running In this mode all ESP and TCS stability features are turned off except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section After 5 seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Equipped in section ofthis manta To furn ESP on Equipped in Section 4 of this manual To turn ESP on WERNING again momentarily depress the ESP Control Switch with the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In NOTE The ESP system will change to Partial Off an emergency
239. nts lees 408 Tank Capacity lees 408 Fuel System Caution 0 323 325 327 FUSES uev Cote iE VIEN e or da c e dea 397 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 325 364 Gasoline Fuel sisse ra 320 Gasoline Reformulated 321 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 321 Gauges Coolant Temperature ss lt e stias eaa dekis 203 Fuel mM C E 200 Odometer 436 INDEX ME Sp edometef ens Keane eae oHe REE ENEG 200 Tachometer seuessesces kta ee ie 203 Gear Ranges sooks adini Ea Gerda 269 274 General Information llle 17 320 Glass Cleaning De eo suse cia Rae 394 Gross Axle Weight Rating 040 330 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 330 GVWR a oleas dpi e EET AES Rete pi os 327 Hands Free Phone UConnect 81 Hard lop sob harm stones reed EU bus 119 Hard Top Modular 00 0005 119 Hard Top Removal 0 00 0 00 000 et 123 Hazard Warning Flasher 350 Head Restraints iuis e EARP ER RT 84 Head Rest sag reia npe dere Sin bie dores ep ree 84 Headlights Bulb Replacement 0504 405 Dimmer Switch cec RR ke 93 Replacing ss rsss etanse re e OR Baca ae 405 SWIECI eek oed Ba OUR CDU tente UR me ats Et 93 Heater unksdao4 a SS Gok Sem p Ex E Reh a RE 250 Heater Engine Block 000000 267 High Beam Indicator 00040 201 Hitches Trailer Towing
240. o go around your lap Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight A belt that i kled i h kl ill pele thaks Pacen mito iie wenng buckle wih not tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you NOTE The Seat Belt Indicator Light will remain on A belt that is loose will not protect you as well In a until the driver s seat belt is buckled sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
241. o select the following format types Program Type 16 ocn No program type or un P ind None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use
242. ode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode 81915f2a Panel gt 3 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Zs Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side x window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Blower Control Use this control center rotary knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position T
243. odel 4WD square meters 907 kg kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 3 8L 4 10 2 Door Rubicon 6 281 lbs 2 849 kg 25 sq ft 2 32 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Automatic Model 4WD square meters 907 kg kg 3 8L 3 21 4 Door X Model 5 121 lbs 2 323 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 2WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X Model 7 621 lbs 3 457 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Manual 2WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X Model 7 647 lbs 8 469 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Automatic 2WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 321 4 Door Sahara Model 5 277 Ibs 2 394 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 2WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 373 4 Door Sahara Model 7 777 lbs 3 527 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Manual 2WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 373 4 Door Sahara Model 7 803 Ibs 3 539 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 Ibs 159 Automatic 2WD square meters 587 kg kg 3 8L 3 21 4 Door X Model 5 325 lbs 2 415 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 1 000 Ibs 100 Ibs 45 Manual 4WD square meters 453 kg kg 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X Model 7 825 lbs 3 549 kg 32 sq ft 2 97 3 500 Ibs 1 350 lbs 159 Manual 4WD square meters 587 kg kg 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 8L 3 73 4 Door X Model 7 825 lbs 3 549 kg 32 sq ft 2 9
244. of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of batteries is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screw driver to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components 7 Separating Transmitter Halves 81182072 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a batt
245. of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main tenance chart The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for spark plug information Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehic
246. of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and re
247. on Pressures Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Radial Ply Tires eR RR 310 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 321 Tire SPINNING aa wie ka Vache d pH e us 310 MMT In Gasoline 0000000 322 Tread Wear Indicators 310 Materials Added To Fuel 322 lite Of Tife wh as Sone eae eee ae 311 Fuel System Cautions 0 323 Replacement Tires sucres trepi riei a 312 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 324 Alignment And Balance 0 0 313 M Adding Fuel suelen B Due Chains sesa ate oe res Core mte ia D 313 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap H Tire Rotation Recommendations 314 W Vehicle Loading cise cia aivciesesecedates H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 315 Certification Label i 2436404 r9 Base System s cn ate aad Cu emet vere oe s 317 Mi Trailer Towing 00 00 00 329 General Information 320 Common Towing Definitions 330 H Fuel Requirements eres eng 320 Trailer Hitch Classification 333 Reformulated Gasoline 321 262 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings ses lr RR dia daw 334 Trailer And Tongue
248. onditions can be reset e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa tion Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Compass Temperature Display This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage
249. onnector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected from the hard top es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 9 Close the swing gate 10 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place on a soft surface to prevent damage Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if Be necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order NOTE The hard top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Also make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DOOR FRAME WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame s removed as you lose the protection they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only Door Frame Removal 2 Door Models 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs 2 per side WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used
250. ontact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispo
251. ontents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50 HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure ny
252. operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel in front of the P Park graphic 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the service brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down 5 Depress the shifter release button and shift into N Neutral 6 The vehicle may then be started in N Neutral Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park Automatic Transmission with Overdrive Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Automatic Shift Controls 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P Park or N Neutral
253. or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission to N Neutral or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case N Neutral NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc mm cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have an injury accident Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving condit
254. ortable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo
255. ot recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY RUN posi tion engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and whe
256. pass Variance symbol appears The current vari ance value will also be displayed Once in the variance mode it is necessary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking Manual compass calibra tion has been initiated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished When the CAL symbol no longer is displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct head ings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in an other area Compass Variance VAR Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North For proper compass function the correct variance zone must be set Setting the Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari ance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be on Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone 15 the values will wrap around to Zone
257. plastic sleeve forward windshield frame 819259f4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 5 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the 6 Locate straps to secure side bows Wrap straps around material is folded back as shown bows as shown Repeat on the other side 7 Reposition sun visors 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x To Close 1 Remove straps from side bows 2 Unclip and move sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull to the front of the vehicle 4 Hook header latches to the loops on the windshield frame close latches and return sun visor s to their original position 5 Slide plastic sleeve rearward over Sunrider link 6 Tuck drip rail retainers into door frame slots SUNRIDER 4 DOOR MODELS NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle To Open 1 Above the front of the rear door place finger up into the cut out in the plastic retainer and pull down rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame Repeat this on the other side UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 81926688 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side ee 81925e7d 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Grasp the front si
258. port bar covers b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME c Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets CAUTION d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a T30 Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug screws if they are overtightened being careful not to cross thread the screws or over tighten es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 5 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 6 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up the Soft Top in this section FREEDOM TOP 3 PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP CAUTION The hard top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads o
259. position into another gear range P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop es STARTING AND OPERATING 275 N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreat
260. procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other
261. quipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or EM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the lef
262. r see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 31 Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer later in this section 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 32 Compass Mini Trip Computer Button If Equipped Press this button to switch between the different func tions COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED This feature located on the instrument cluster speedom eter and tachometer displays information on outside temperature compass direction and trip information Control Buttons Press and release the left button on the instrument cluster to access the computer displays Press and hold the left button on the instrument cluster for 2 to 3 seconds to switch from English to Metric displays E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Reset Press and hold the right button on the instrument cluster while function is being displayed to reset The following trip c
263. r d Ghee eu E 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by the dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Manual Transmission Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key D 80e54ed7 2 Ignition Key Positions Automatic Transmission If Equipped Place the shift lever in P Park Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key In Ignition Reminder WARNING Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key mm ous for a number of reasons A child or others could STEERING WHEEL LOCK be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or Your vehicle is equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering w
264. rakes may cause To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might possible When the parking brake is applied with the not have full braking power when you need it to ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru prevent an accident If you have been operating your ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked up slightly press the center button then lower the lever and cleaned as necessary completely en STARTING AND OPERATING 293 NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must the gear shift lever is in the P Park position automatic be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving transmission or R Reverse or 1st gear manual trans the vehicle mission When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the gear shift lever in P Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of P Park Parking Brake 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in P Park a manual transmission in R Reverse or 1st gear Failure
265. rature Gauge 203 Hazard Warning Flasher 350 Jacking 2 943 xe e RERI EM berr ien eng ed 352 Jump Starting iu ceding Ea eae d n RE 355 Tow HOOKS lt s esti dead dias me hae s 358 Emission Control System Maintenance 364412 PAGING ANH CNRC 71 HO 434 INDEX a Air Cleaner 3 e a cha akau hea he RUE RUN 373 Block Heater aieri gaea eea e en 267 Break In Recommendations 7 Compartment eese 0 0 6 362 Compartment Identification 362 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 71 324 Fails to Start resentas peene 265 Flooded Starting illl 265 Fuel Requirements 0 320 408 Jump Staring serer ge dew aE one oe re ees 355 Oll teenaged eed sed eR manm 367 408 Oil Disposal ii is erdt cise ceaanes 369 OILBHtef 2434052 4 lt 8etdo etd se Sane e ae Xe 369 Oil Selection 0 0 ns 408 Operation av toe beta eae eimi ew dee si 71 Overheating xc serate ru vea deren s 351 SAHNE quere ae eK re ieee dE Esci ebur een 263 Temperature Gauge 0 ee ee eee eee 203 Engine Oil Viscosity seses tanned ds asakasi 368 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 368 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 55 Entry System Illuminated 18 Event Data Recorder 0 0000 c eee 56 Exhaust Gas Caution 00055 71 324 Exhaust System 377 Extender Seat Belt 2 0 00 0 0c eee eee 47 Exterior Finish Care 0
266. requent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the pan
267. ring an accident Remember always wear seat belts 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 Sail Panel 5 Plastic Retainer ee 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half doors carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 3 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Insert finger behind the plastic retainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Repeat this on the opposite side es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 4 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the 6 Before unzipping the rear window release th
268. ring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bott
269. rotate at the same speed 4WD 21 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation al
270. ry ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting 2 Door Models 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Tether Strap Mounting 4 Door Models Route the tether
271. s repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e After extended operation in mud sand water or If you experience unusual vibration after driving in similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as impacted material Impacted material can cause a soon as possible wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation WARNING PARKING BRAKE Abrasive material in any part of the b
272. s the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The swing gate can be unlocked using the remote keyless NOTE Close flip up window before swing gate hard entry or by activating the power door lock switches top models only located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate CAUTION handle Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing swing gate as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle See ee Gate Handle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and side airbags if equipped for both the driver and front passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multi st
273. s UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 1 Remove the rear subwoofer if equipped mounting 4 Press down on release bar on each side and pull seat screws 3 using a 130 Torx head driver out and away from lower bracket 5 Remove seat from the vehicle Subwoofer 2 Unplug electrical connector from rear subwoofer if equipped 3 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section Release Bar Location 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Replacing the Rear Seat 2 Door Models Reverse steps for removing the seat WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the ve hicle The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat 4 Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to it s mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a ve
274. s on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessa
275. se vehicles do not have fully enclosed hard doors Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and serious injury 6 INTRODUCTION or death Because of its open body construction your vehicle offers less protection than closed vehicles in the event of an accident A WARNING EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS A WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK CHILDREN CAN BF KII FD OR SFRIOUSLY INJURFD BY THE AIR BAG THE BACK SEAT IS THE SAFEST PLACE FOR CHILDREN NEVER PUT A REAR FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT ALWAYS USE SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT AIR BAGS BS AVOID ABRUPT MANEUVERS AND EXCESSIVE SPEED ALWAYS BUCKLE UP SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR FURTHER INFORMATION MEME AVEC DES SACS A MISE EN GARDE GONFLABLES PERFECTIONN S PLUS GRAND RISQUE A MISE EN GARDE US SRAND Rae LES ENFANTS PEUVENT ETRE TUES QU GRAVEMENT BLESSES PAR UN SAC GONFLABLE LA BANQUETTE ARRI RE EST LA PLACE LA PLUS S CURITAIRE POUR LES ENFANTS NE JAMAIS PLACER UN SI GE POUR ENFANT ORIENT VERS L ARRI RE LAVANT DU V HICULE UTILISEZ TOUJOURS LA CEINTURE DE S CURIT ET LE SYST ME OE RETENUE POUR FANT CONSULTEZ LE GUIDE DE L AUTOMOBILISTE POUR OBTENIR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES SACS GONFLABLE
276. set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above
277. shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob lems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held
278. sitioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuu
279. so es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION The TPMS has been
280. ssary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Shift automatic transmission into N Neutral or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 3 Shift transfer case lever into N Neutral 4 Start engine 5 Shift automatic transmission into D Drive or manual transmission into gear 6 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 7 Shut the engine off and place the ignition key into the ACC position 8 Shift automatic transmission into P Park 9 Apply parking brake 10 Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 11 Release parking brake 12 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into P Park with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the transfer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into P Park refer to steps 7 8 above Shifting Out Of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Shift automatic transmission into N Neutral or de press clutch pedal on manual transmission 2 Shift transfer case lever into desired position 3 Shift automatic transmiss
281. ssing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within y jecte SC e emove CAUTION 10 seco
282. stem In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft lbs 20 34 N m CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants
283. stem detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel
284. strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipat
285. t top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a T30 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top 3 Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa tion later in this section Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs 4 for 2 door models 6 for 4 door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top 3 Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal later in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the 4 screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip s
286. t Belt 00 0000 eee 45 Remote Control Door LOCKS iere Ad dake Ce ees 19 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Starting System 005 24 Replacement Bulbs 0000000 404 Replacement Keys 0 00 00 e eee 15 Replacement Parts 366 Replacement Tires 1 1 2 0 000000 cee 312 Reporting Safety Defects 04 423 Restraint Head ove d EM 84 Restraints Child llle 58 63 Restraints Occupant 6 0 0 0 eee eee ee 37 Roll Over Warning 0 00 5 Rotation Tires i 2 3emxk 9e Rae See ee 314 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 72 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 73 Safety Defects Reporting llle 423 Safety Information Tire 442 INDEX aa Safety TIPS eaux xe dened US Mace eae Kan es 71 Satellite Radio 2 0 ee 244 245 Satellite Radio Antenna lll 246 Schedule Maintenance llle 412 Seat Belt Reminder llle 45 Seat Belts issn cae a aha ke a ult lave Ae oie eee 38 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 44 And Pregnant Women esses 46 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 00 00 citri 58 68 Extender uae Ba Ree ale Chee A 47 Front Seat zig ga ebrei WU Ea Ex 38 Maintenance llle 395 Pretensioners llle 45 Reminder llle 201 Seals 4435443 tae Reade eae SHADE Cae 81 Adj stmeht za trien nre meie te Aot bed i 82 Clean
287. t bolts e Reattach sport bar Velcro covering es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the 6 black REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield near Window WipenWasher If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position 6 Reinstall wiper arms 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer so
288. t or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 ocn No program type or un P ind None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates w
289. tact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a ser
290. ted in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 421 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico con
291. tenance 374 Power Steering Fluid Check 375 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication os eae m Rm 376 Body Lubrication llle 376 Windshield Wiper Blades 376 Windshield And Rear Window Washers 377 Exhaust System 0 0 0 0 00 cae 377 Cooling System 6 6 llle 378 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 383 Brake Systeri simrer ungn enana S AE 383 Automatic Transmission less 385 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission as eeoa ridad aia eee ee 387 Manual Transmission lesse 387 Transfer Case 1 2 eee eee eee 388 Front Rear Axle Fluid Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ll Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module W Vehicle Storage 2 o Rn ll Replacement Bulbs If Equipped ll Bulb Replacement Head Light Front Park Turn Signal Front Side Marker Front Fog Light Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Lights Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 Bl Fluid Capacities poses sares tanani aak aie 408 ENGINE un ote ore E aces AREE O A ES 409 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 409 Chassis zeugen Y REG EY Was EY EDO as 410 362 MAI
292. ter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery
293. that Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unap proved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire w
294. the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery Rear Cargo Lamp 4 Door Only Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light Multi Function Control Lever The multi function control lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals Multi Function Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multi function control lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are
295. the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RE
296. the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat x Manual Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjustment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Front Seat Back Recline Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat 2 Door Models To recline Push the lever on the seatback rearward toward the rear 1 Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back of the vehicle to tilt the entire seat forward to the desired position and release the handle Easy Entry Lever Recline Lever 2 Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Easy Entry Seat 1 To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seat back upright until it locks 2 Push the seat rearward until the track locks NOTE The front passenger seat has a full recliner memory which will allow the seat back to be returned to it s original position NOTE The front passenger seat has a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of it s original position NOTE The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the returning of the seat to it s sitting position Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The front head restraints have a lo
297. the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Sectio
298. the rear Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 8L 362 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 363 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 364 E Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs ils k b sem kra titia Katana 364 Bl Replacement Parts 000000 366 H Dealer Service llle 366 Bi Maintenance Procedures onnon aaau 367 Engin Qil 4 ossa se ees 367 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 370 Spark PISS uu epe dope oder epe eis 370 Catalytic Converter llle 370 Crankcase Emission Control System 372 Fuel Filter eee 372 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sss 373 Maintenance Free Battery 373 Air Conditioner Main
299. the top can then be snapped into place If temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 CAUTION WARNING Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash e Do not drive vehicle with rear window curtain up Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Section 7 of this manual It contains important informa tion on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top frame work when opening or closing Damage to the top may result unless side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the ve hicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember
300. ther than environmen tal rain snow etc CAUTION Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Removal 3 Turn rear L shaped lock located above shoulder belt NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing anchorage right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move to the side 2 Turn center L shaped locks 2 from center of roof panel 818efe37 4 Turn rear fasteners knobs located on overhead speaker bar assembly counter clockwise until they can be removed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 84913300 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the 6 Remove panel eee To remove right panel follow steps above except for step 2 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Installation NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Front Panel s Installation Only With Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn left and right panels over and move spacer block located on rear of panel upward 90 degrees NOTE
301. three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Front Door Removal 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 2 Unplug wiring harness connector under instrument panel en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Rear Door Removal 4 Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 3 Unhook door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow door to swing fully open as mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door 2 Slide front seat s fully forward To reinstall the door s perform the above steps in the opposite order 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 Remove interior B pillar trim access door at bottom of B pillar 5 Unhook door strap from the body hook VERS 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins 4 Unplug wiring harness connector from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the above steps in the opposite order E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STAR
302. tion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel center stack below the radio The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window 4 door models and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window 4 door models The switches will continue to function for up to 2 minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a door is opened Power Window Switches 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 2 minutes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel t
303. tomatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed The throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h oT AeA Cc N 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the comple
304. ton Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion
305. tor Light O D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected The O D OFF button is located on the gear shift lever 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the front sway pred bar is disconnected es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The ESP BAS warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 for more information 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped A This light informs you of a problem with the ESP BAS Electronic Throttle Control System If a prob lem is detected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the P Park position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable howeve
306. tor from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Park Turn Signal 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Side Marker 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counter clockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Front Fog Light 1 Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia and disconnect the electrical connector from underneath 2 Turn the bulb 1 4 turn counter clockwise CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up
307. trol of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for more information CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings en STARTING AND OPERATING
308. u could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction h
309. u or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The backup lights will come on when your vehicle is in R Reverse gear and the ignition is in the ON ENEINING Position When parking your vehicle always leave a manual o transmission in first gear and apply the parking brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never use any gear as a substitute for the parking brake CAUTION To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life of your manual transmission follow these tips Manual Shift Controls e Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse or from reverse to a forward gear stop vehicle com pletely Otherwise transmission damage may result ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 Do not operate at sustained high engine or road speeds in lower gears Engine damage may result Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too high a speed for that gear Engine clutch or transmis sion damage may result Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal This
310. ugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accesso ries still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Front Cup Holders 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of the STORAGE genitor console Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock insert ignition key and turn To open press the latch and lift cover Rear Cup Holders 818 55ba Center Console ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Rear Storage Compartment The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage com partment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on loop and twist 90 d
311. um Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire mH safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1
312. under one of the following licenses United States 0 0 0 0 eese KR55120123 Canada yerepe ER boy ECER RS 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations 87 and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800diab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasoline and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD en STARTING AND OPERATING 321 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas
313. ur OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic ee MAINTAINING YOUR
314. ures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures 81915192 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Circulation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in Re circulate mode Only use the Recirculate mode to tempo rarily block out any outside s19160c4 Odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather A NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculate mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculate mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE The Recirculate mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Operation Press this button to engage the air conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the air conditioni
315. urface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place automatic transmission in P Park or manual transmission in R Reverse Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353 e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel N BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions 1 Remove spare tire jack and tools from stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect jack handle driver to extension then to lug wrench 354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 4 Operate jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING
316. utward to seal with the swing gate when closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 19 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the 17 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the sail panel retainers into the body side channel window 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 20 Open the doors and insert the roof retainers into the 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to channels above the door starting at the front and work their secured position ing rearward 81926670 NE 81926539 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 SUNRIDER 2 DOOR MODELS NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle To Open 1 Insert finger behind the plastic retainer Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel Repeat this on the other side 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Release the header latches from the loops on the 4 Slide the
317. vice contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe th
318. vices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reacti vated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does n
319. w 20 F Or Brake Transmission Interlock System 273 Re ee eee spa Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 273 If Engine Fails To Start 0 0 265 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation Command Trac After Starting coss dere hie ando E aeg 266 Or Rock Trac If Equipped 278 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 267 Operating Instructions Precautions 278 260 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Shift Positions i au eh hoe Behe Oe Kom 280 Shitting Procedure i e e gs 281 Bi Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped 282 Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok Rubicon Models 283 ll Rear Axle Lock 4WD Non Rubicon Models lf Equipped esac ere pk Rem 284 li Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect If Equipped 284 H On Road Driving Tips 00 0 287 E Off Road Driving Tips 0 0 287 When To Use 4L Low Range 288 Driving Through Water 288 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 290 Hill Climbing ee encie m as Cae ee e s 290 Traction Downhill After Driving Off Road li Parking Brake ll Anti Lock Brake System ll Power Steering H Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Identification Number TIN Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Bl Tires General Information Tire Pressures aro oieee ei a e eee Tire Inflati
320. w will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 14 To install the side windows affix the window tem porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the upper rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 inch 2 5 cm ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 15 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 16 Continue closing the zipper only along the top edge of the window 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 18 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 19 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 21 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and ali
321. witch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your
322. wn 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C EJ LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT TUNE SCROLL U AUX 8189f8f9 REQ Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to
323. y 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 5 Press and hold the Unlock button on the key fob 6 After holding the Unlock button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds 7 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have successfully entered program mode All fobs that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 8 Using the fob to be programmed press and release both the Lock and Unlock buttons simultaneously 9 A single chime will be heard 10 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the Unlock button on the fob 11 A single chime will be heard 12 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional fobs 13 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 14 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed fobs function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210
324. y and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate seek SCAN Mo C RND MP3 WMA PUSHON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f5 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition s
325. y fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 8163e6a8 Three Button Transmitter This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate or activate the panic alarm from distances a maximum of 66 feet 20 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the Unlock button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the Unlock button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first Unlock button press by using the follow ing procedure 1 Press and hold the Lock button on a programmed key fob 2 Continue to hold the Lock button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the Unlock button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the Lock Unlock button on the keyfob NOTE Pressing the Lock button on the keyfob while you are inside the vehicle will activate th
326. ydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING EXAMPLE ONLY An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION mo Weight Distributing Hitch System ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 8181f96f Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer H
327. you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On Road Off Road Driving Tips in this manual This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings ee INTRODUCTION 5 When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested i
328. you have 15 minutes to enter the vehicle insert the key in the ignition and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of P Park The brake pedal is pressed The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee DOORS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE GAS CAP NOFUSE or ESPOFF are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving
329. ype When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into N Neutral and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures siiis 263 W Manual Transmission Manual Transmission naaa 263 6 Speed Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission 263 W Automatic Transmission Normal Starting s sece gere EAE 264 Shift Lock Manual Override 272 Extreme Cold Weather Belo

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

P2002 JF CS-LSA        KRAFTWERK 1041  Télécharger le fichier  ELEC TR ONI WIND INSTRUMENT  Automatic intertext column spacing  Guide d`installation    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file